MX310 and MX317
User's Guide
June 2017
Machine type(s):
7015
Model(s):
270
www.lexmark.com
Contents
2
Contents
Safety information........................................................................................ 6
Conventions.......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer.............................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................ 10
Printer configurations......................................................................................................................................... 11
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner................................................................................... 12
Using the ADF and scanner glass..................................................................................................................13
Using the printer control panel....................................................................................................................... 13
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights...................................................... 14
Additional printer setup............................................................................. 16
Installing internal options................................................................................................................................. 16
Installing hardware options............................................................................................................................. 19
Attaching cables................................................................................................................................................ 23
Setting up the printer software...................................................................................................................... 24
Networking..........................................................................................................................................................25
Verifying printer setup......................................................................................................................................28
Loading paper and specialty media......................................................... 30
Setting the paper size and type.................................................................................................................... 30
Configuring Universal paper settings.......................................................................................................... 30
Loading trays...................................................................................................................................................... 30
Loading the multipurpose feeder..................................................................................................................35
Linking and unlinking trays............................................................................................................................. 39
Paper and specialty media guide............................................................. 42
Using specialty media...................................................................................................................................... 42
Paper guidelines................................................................................................................................................ 44
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights............................................................................................... 48
Printing......................................................................................................... 51
Printing a document.......................................................................................................................................... 51
Printing from a mobile device......................................................................................................................... 51
Contents
3
Printing confidential and other held jobs.................................................................................................... 53
Printing information pages..............................................................................................................................54
Canceling a print job........................................................................................................................................ 54
Copying........................................................................................................56
Making copies.................................................................................................................................................... 56
Copying photos..................................................................................................................................................57
Copying on specialty media........................................................................................................................... 57
Customizing copy settings..............................................................................................................................59
Placing information on copies........................................................................................................................63
Canceling a copy job........................................................................................................................................64
Understanding the copy options...................................................................................................................64
E-mailing...................................................................................................... 67
Setting up the printer to e-mail...................................................................................................................... 67
Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................ 68
E-mailing a document.......................................................................................................................................68
Canceling an e-mail.......................................................................................................................................... 68
Faxing...........................................................................................................69
Setting up the printer to fax............................................................................................................................69
Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................83
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server...............................................84
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................. 85
Canceling an outgoing fax..............................................................................................................................86
Holding and forwarding faxes........................................................................................................................ 87
Understanding the fax options...................................................................................................................... 88
Scanning...................................................................................................... 90
Scanning to an FTP address.......................................................................................................................... 90
Scanning to a computer................................................................................................................................... 91
Understanding the printer menus............................................................93
Menus list.............................................................................................................................................................93
Paper menu.........................................................................................................................................................94
Reports menu....................................................................................................................................................103
Network/Ports menu....................................................................................................................................... 104
Security menu....................................................................................................................................................110
Contents
4
Settings menu....................................................................................................................................................112
Help menu......................................................................................................................................................... 145
Saving money and the environment...................................................... 146
Saving paper and toner..................................................................................................................................146
Saving energy...................................................................................................................................................146
Recycling............................................................................................................................................................ 149
Securing the printer...................................................................................151
Statement of Volatility......................................................................................................................................151
Erasing volatile memory..................................................................................................................................151
Erasing non‑volatile memory......................................................................................................................... 151
Finding printer security information............................................................................................................152
Maintaining the printer.............................................................................153
Cleaning printer parts..................................................................................................................................... 153
Checking the status of parts and supplies................................................................................................155
Estimated number of remaining pages......................................................................................................155
Ordering supplies............................................................................................................................................ 156
Storing supplies................................................................................................................................................158
Replacing supplies.......................................................................................................................................... 158
Moving the printer........................................................................................................................................... 162
Managing the printer................................................................................164
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................164
Accessing the remote control panel...........................................................................................................164
Setting up e‑mail alerts...................................................................................................................................164
Viewing reports................................................................................................................................................ 165
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server....................................................165
Restoring factory default settings................................................................................................................166
Clearing jams............................................................................................. 167
Avoiding jams....................................................................................................................................................167
Identifying jam locations................................................................................................................................ 168
Paper jam in the front door........................................................................................................................... 169
Paper jam in the rear door.............................................................................................................................. 171
Paper jam in the standard bin.......................................................................................................................172
Paper jam in the duplex unit..........................................................................................................................173
Contents
5
Paper jam in trays.............................................................................................................................................174
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder........................................................................................................ 174
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder.......................................................................................... 176
Troubleshooting.........................................................................................177
Understanding the printer messages......................................................................................................... 177
Solving printer problems.................................................................................................................................191
Solving print problems....................................................................................................................................197
Solving copy problems...................................................................................................................................221
Solving fax problems..................................................................................................................................... 224
Solving scanner problems............................................................................................................................. 231
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................... 235
Contacting customer support......................................................................................................................236
Notices....................................................................................................... 237
Product information........................................................................................................................................ 237
Edition notice....................................................................................................................................................237
Power consumption....................................................................................................................................... 242
Index........................................................................................................... 251
Safety information
6
Safety information
Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or software.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Different types of caution statements include:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily
overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer
performance.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near
water or wet locations.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external
connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked
plug-in ports.
Safety information
7
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified in the User’s Guide may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for
selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power
cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects
such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect
the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet
before inspecting it.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•
•
•
•
Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then lift the printer off the
trays. Do not try to lift the printer and the trays at the same time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
Safety information
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
•
•
•
•
Keep the printer in an upright position.
Avoid severe jarring movements.
Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
8
Learning about the printer
9
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?
Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
Setup documentation—The setup documentation
came with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
Loading paper
Configuring printer settings
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The
guides are available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Viewing and printing documents and photos
Setting up and using the printer software
Configuring the printer on a network
Caring for and maintaining the printer
Troubleshooting and solving problems
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available
at http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending
on your operating system.
Learning about the printer
What are you looking for?
10
Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer Lexmark support Web site—
support:
http://support.lexmark.com
•
•
•
•
•
Documentation
Driver downloads
Live chat support
E‑mail support
Voice support
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation
for your country or region can be found on the
support Web site or on the printed warranty that came
with your printer.
Record the following information (located on the
store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have
it ready when you contact customer support so that
they may serve you faster:
•
•
•
•
Warranty information
Machine Type number
Serial number
Date purchased
Store where purchased
Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited
Warranty included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to
install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature ‑40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer
11
5
4
1
3
1
Right side 300 mm (12 in.)
2
Front
510 mm (20 in.)
3
Left side
200 mm (8 in.)
4
Rear
200 mm (8 in.)
5
Top
540 mm (21 in.)
1
2
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
You can configure your printer by adding an optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray. For instructions on installing the
optional tray, see “Installing optional trays” on page 20.
Learning about the printer
12
2
3
1
4
10
9
5
8
7
6
1
Printer control panel
2
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
3
ADF tray
4
ADF bin
5
Front door release button
6
Standard 250‑sheet tray
7
Optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
8
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder
9
Paper stop
10
Standard bin
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•
•
•
•
•
Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer
13
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Note: The ADF scans only one side of the page.
Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Using the ADF
•
•
•
•
•
Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 368 mm (8.5 x 14.5 inches) long.
Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14–32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
• Place the document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
• Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 296.9 mm (8.5 x 11.69 inches).
• Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) thick.
Using the printer control panel
1
13
2
12
3 4 5
11
6 7
10
9
8
Learning about the printer
Use the
14
To
• View the printer status and messages.
• Set up and operate the printer.
1
Display
2
Arrow buttons
3
Select button
4
Address book button View all the stored addresses.
5
Redial button
View the last number dialed.
6
Keypad
Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
7
Sleep button
Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Scroll up and down or left and right.
• Select menu options.
• Save settings.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•
•
•
•
Press any hard button.
Open a door or cover.
Send a print job from the computer.
Perform a power‑on reset using the main power switch.
8
Cancel button
Cancel all printer activity.
9
Start button
Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
10
Fax button
Send faxes.
11
Back button
Return to the previous screen.
12
Home button
Go to the home screen.
13
Indicator light
Check the status of the printer.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and
indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the control panel signify a printer status or condition.
Indicator light
Printer status
Off
The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green
The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green
The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red
The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light
Printer status
Off
The printer is off, idle, or in Ready state.
Solid amber
The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber
The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Learning about the printer
Sleep button light
15
Printer status
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode.
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
Additional printer setup
16
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power
cord from the electircal outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
Available internal options
Memory cards
• Flash memory
• Fonts
Accessing the controller board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Open the controller board access door.
Additional printer setup
17
2 Open the controller board shield using the green handle.
1
2
3 Use the following illustration to locate the option card connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
4 Close the shield, and then the access door.
1
2
Additional printer setup
18
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1 Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 16.
2 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
Additional printer setup
19
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush with the controller board.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
• Printer stand
• Optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
• Printer
Additional printer setup
20
For more information on installing a printer stand, optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray, or spacer, see the setup
sheet that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional
furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
1
2
2 Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.
Additional printer setup
3 Pull out the tray from the base.
4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5 Insert the tray into the base.
6 Place the tray near the printer.
7 Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
21
Additional printer setup
22
8 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the
printer.
2
1
Notes:
• When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 24.
• To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the
printer until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the
bottom.
Additional printer setup
23
Attaching cables
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any
wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.
Use the
To
1
Power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
2
Power switch
Turn on or turn off the printer.
3
Ethernet port
Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
4
EXT port
Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the
telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and
if this connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the adapter plug to access the port.
5
LINE port
Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ‑11), DSL
filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
6
USB printer port
Connect the printer to a computer.
Additional printer setup
7
24
Use the
To
Security slot
Attach a lock to secure the printer in place.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the software CD that came with your printer.
• Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then select your printer and operating system.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.
Additional printer setup
25
Networking
Notes:
• Purchase a MarkNetTM N8352 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless
network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with
the adapter.
• A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP),
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you
begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing
the printer.
•
•
•
•
A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
The network gateway
The network mask
A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can
choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer
can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems
caused by a damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
• Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if
you are not sure which channel to select.
Additional printer setup
26
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the
key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must
be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate
on the network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•
•
•
•
Authentication type
Inner authentication type
802.1X user name and password
Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless
utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID
or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access
point, or contact your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation
that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or
consult your system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
• Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Network/Ports >
> Active NIC >
> Auto >
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
>
> Network/Ports >
> Wireless Connection Setup >
2 Select a wireless connection setup.
> Network [x] >
> Network [x] Setup >
> Wireless
Additional printer setup
27
Use
To
Search for networks
Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3 Press
, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration (PBC) method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
>
> Network/Ports >
> Wireless Connection Setup >
> Network [x] >
> Network [x] Setup >
> Wi‑Fi Protected Setup >
> Wireless
> Start Push Button Method >
2 Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
>
> Network/Ports >
> Wireless Connection Setup >
> Network [x] >
> Network [x] Setup >
> Wi‑Fi Protected Setup >
> Wireless
> Start PIN Method >
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address bar.
Notes:
• The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Additional printer setup
28
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web
Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
• Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network
mode, and channel.
4 Click Submit.
5 Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Verifying printer setup
Printing a menu settings page
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify if the printer options are installed
correctly.
Note: If you have not changed any menu settings, then the menu settings page lists all the factory default
settings. When you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings
as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose
another value, and save it.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Reports >
> Menu Settings Page >
Additional printer setup
29
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Reports >
> Network Setup Page >
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and then confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup
page.
Loading paper and specialty media
30
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more
information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 167 and “Storing paper” on page 47.
Setting the paper size and type
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Paper Menu >
> Paper Size/Type >
2 Press the up or down arrow button to select the tray or feeder size, and then press
3 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper size, and then press
.
.
4 Press the up or down arrow button to select the tray or feeder type, and then press
5 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper type, and then press
.
.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the
printer menus.
Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal paper size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches), and is supported only from
the multipurpose feeder.
• The largest supported Universal paper size is 215.9 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches), and is supported
from all paper sources.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Paper Menu >
> Universal Setup >
> Units of Measure >
> select a
unit of measure >
2 Select Portrait Width or Portrait Height, and then press
.
3 Press the left or right arrow button to change the setting, and then press
.
Loading trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray completely.
Loading paper and specialty media
31
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may
cause a jam.
2 Squeeze and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
1
2
A5
A4
EXEC
B5
LTR
Loading paper and specialty media
32
3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.
1
A4
EX
LTR
EC
B5
2
A5
Notes:
• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide tab backward to
accommodate their length.
• When loading legal‑size paper, the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed
to dust. To protect the paper from dust, you can purchase a dust cover separately. For more
information, contact customer support.
• If you are loading A6-size paper in the standard tray, then squeeze and then slide the length guide
tab toward the center of the tray to the A6‑size position.
• Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of
the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
33
A4
EXE
C
LTR
B5
A5
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
5 Load the paper stack.
Notes:
• Load with the printable side facedown when using recycled or preprinted paper.
• Load prepunched paper with the holes on the top edge toward the front of the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
34
• Load letterhead facedown, with the top edge of the sheet toward the front of the tray. For two‑sided
printing, load letterhead faceup with the bottom edge of the sheet toward the front of the tray.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide.
6 Insert the tray.
7 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading paper and specialty media
35
Loading the multipurpose feeder
Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on different paper sizes and types or specialty media, such as card
stock, transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You can also use it for single‑page print jobs on letterhead.
1 Open the multipurpose feeder.
a Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Loading paper and specialty media
36
b Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
2 Squeeze the tab on the left width guide, and then move the guides for the paper you are loading.
1
2
3 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
• Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
• Hold transparencies by the edges. Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
Loading paper and specialty media
37
• Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on
a level surface.
4 Load the paper or specialty media.
Notes:
• Do not force paper or specialty media into the multipurpose feeder.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the
paper guides. Overfilling may cause paper jams.
• Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top
edge entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging that
the transparencies came in.
Loading paper and specialty media
38
Note: When loading A6‑size paper, make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against
the edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place.
• Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first. For two‑sided (duplex) printing, load
letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first.
Loading paper and specialty media
39
• Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5 From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or
specialty media loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking and unlinking trays
Note: This feature applies only in network printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the tray settings to specify the paper size and type for the tray.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match with that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match with that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Loading paper and specialty media
40
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Paper Menu >
> Custom Names
2 Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.
3 Press
.
4 Press Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
41
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Paper Menu >
> Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Press
.
Paper and specialty media guide
42
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel.
Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•
•
•
•
Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
– “Loading trays” on page 30
– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 35
Tips on using transparencies
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 185°C (365°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper
menu, then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up to 195°C (383°F).
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
• Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling
excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton
envelopes must not exceed 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
Paper and specialty media guide
43
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal
envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Note: Use only paper label sheets. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two‑sided labels are not supported.
For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available
at http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 240°C (464°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling,
or releasing hazardous emissions.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 172‑kPa (25‑psi) pressure
without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial
sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner
cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inch) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the
label.
• Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet. Zone coating of the adhesive
should be at least 1 mm (0.04 inch) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could
void the warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 2‑mm (0.08‑inch) strip on the leading and
driver edge, and then use a non‑oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation is recommended, especially when printing bar codes.
Paper and specialty media guide
44
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content,
thickness, and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
• From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
card stock loaded in the tray.
• Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper
feed problems.
• Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges
on a level surface.
Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample
of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when
evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120‑g/m2 (32‑lb) bond grain long paper. The
multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163‑g/m2 (43‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper
lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use
75‑g/m2 (20‑lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), we recommended
to use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported only for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can
occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If
paper is too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100
and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print
quality.
Paper and specialty media guide
45
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes
that can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing.
Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer
environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length
of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides
the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality.
Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to
withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that
are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements;
latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Paper and specialty media guide
46
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced
specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers
that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted
with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it
moves through the printer)
• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree
of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally
responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as
colorants and “glue” often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However,
using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its
products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company
commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor
(up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This
is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled
paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is wellequipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages
purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is
maintained. However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of
printing:
1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or the Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These
certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ
environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight
paper, or recycled paper.
Paper and specialty media guide
47
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•
•
•
•
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•
•
•
•
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (±
0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with
a software application to successfully print on these forms.)
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can
be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
•
•
•
•
Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and
wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Paper and specialty media guide
48
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
Optional 250‑
250‑sheet tray or 550‑sheet
tray
Business card
X
X
3 x 5 in.
X
X
4 x 6 in.
X
X
Multipurpose
feeder
X
ADF
Scanner
glass
Duplex
printing
X
X
1
X
X
1
X
X
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
A5
X
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)
X
X
JIS B5
X
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
Letter
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
X
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive
X
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (México)
X
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
1
Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal.
2
Paper is supported in two‑sided (duplex) printing only if the width is at least 210 mm (8.27 in.) and the length is at
least 279.4 mm (11 in.). The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder.
3
Paper is supported only if the width is at least 215.9 mm (8.5 in.) and the length is at least 296.9 mm (11.7 in.).
4
Paper is supported only if the length is at least 296.9 mm (11.7 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide
Paper size and
dimension
49
Standard
Optional 250‑
250‑sheet tray or 550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
ADF
Folio
Scanner
glass
Duplex
printing
X
215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement
139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Universal2
76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.92 mm
(8.5 x 14.17 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
9 Envelope
98.4 x 226.1 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
10 Envelope
104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
Other Envelope
85.7 x 165 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
1
4
X
Paper is supported only if the paper size setting is set to Universal.
2
Paper is supported in two‑sided (duplex) printing only if the width is at least 210 mm (8.27 in.) and the length is at
least 279.4 mm (11 in.). The smallest supported Universal paper size is supported only in the multipurpose feeder.
3
Paper is supported only if the width is at least 215.9 mm (8.5 in.) and the length is at least 296.9 mm (11.7 in.).
4
Paper is supported only if the length is at least 296.9 mm (11.7 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide
50
Supported paper types and weights
The standard tray supports 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper weights. The optional tray supports 60–120‑g/m2 (16–
32‑lb) paper weights. The multipurpose feeder supports 60–163‑g/m2 (16–43‑lb) paper weights.
Paper type
250‑ or
550‑sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder
Duplex mode
ADF
Scanner glass
Plain paper
Card stock
X
Transparencies
X
X
Recycled
Paper labels1
X
Bond
Envelope2
X
X
X
Rough envelope
X
X
X
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper
Light paper
Heavy paper
Rough/Cotton
X
Custom Type [x]
1 One‑sided
paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. We recommend printing only
up to 20 pages of paper labels per month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two‑sided labels are not supported.
2
Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.
Printing
51
Printing
Printing a document
Printing from a computer
Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before sending the
print job.
1 From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2 If necessary, adjust the settings.
3 Send the print job.
Adjusting toner darkness
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Settings >
> Print Settings >
2 Adjust the toner darkness, and then press
> Quality Menu >
> Toner Darkness
.
Printing from a mobile device
Note: Make sure that the printer and mobile device share the same wireless network. For information on
configuring the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the device.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android version 4.4 or later. It
allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Printing
52
Note: Before printing, make sure that the Mopria Print Service is enabled.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2 Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3 Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud PrintTM is a mobile printing service that allows enabled applications on mobile devices to print
to any Google Cloud Print‑ready printer.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch an enabled application.
2 Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3 Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrint is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified
printer.
Notes:
• This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
• This application is supported only in some printer models.
1 From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2 Select an item to print, and then tap the share icon.
3 Tap Print, and then select a printer.
4 Print the document.
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Mobile Print
LexmarkTM Mobile Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a supported Lexmark printer.
1 Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Mobile Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2 Select a printer.
3 Print the document.
Printing
53
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Security >
> Confidential Print > select the print job type
Print job type
Description
Max Invalid PIN
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the
printer control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration
Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Verify Job Expiration
Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print
job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are
printed.
Reserve Job Expiration
Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held
until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2 Press
.
Printing held jobs
1 From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2 Select the printer, and then do either of the following:
• For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
• For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3 Select the print job type.
4 If necessary, assign a user name.
5 Send the print job.
Printing
54
6 From the printer home screen, select Held Jobs.
7 Send the print job.
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3 Modify the settings:
• Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry
attempts, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
• Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified
time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4 Save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Reports >
> Print Fonts
2 Press the up or down arrow button to select the font setting.
3 Press
.
Note: The PPDS fonts appear only when the PPDS data stream is activated.
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, press
.
2 When a list of print jobs appears, select the job to cancel, and then press
3 Press
to go back to the home screen.
.
Printing
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
55
Copying
56
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Note: The ADF scans only one side of the sheet.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy
paper are the same.
3 From the printer control panel, press
.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying
57
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, use the keypad to enter the number of copies, and then press
.
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the printer control panel, use the keypad to enter the number of copies, and then press
.
Note: If you want to scan another document, then place the next document on the scanner glass, press
the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
3 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Content Type > Photo
3 From the Content Source menu, choose a setting that best describes the original photo your are copying,
and then press
.
Note: If you want to copy another photo, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow
button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
4 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
58
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Copy from > select the size of the original document
4 Navigate to:
Copy to >
> select the tray containing the transparencies >
> select the number of copies or enter
a number on the keypad >
5 If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then do the following:
a Navigate to:
Copy to >
> Manual Feeder >
> select the size of the transparencies >
b Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then press
> Transparency >
.
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
6 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Copy from > select the size of the original document
4 Navigate to:
Copy to >
> select the tray containing the letterhead >
> select the number of copies or enter a
number on the keypad >
5 If there are no trays that contain letterhead, then do the following:
a Navigate to:
Copy to >
> Manual Feeder >
> select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead
b Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then press
.
Copying
59
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
6 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Copy from > select the size of the original document
4 Navigate to:
Copy to >
> select a new size for the copy > select the number of copies or enter a number on the
keypad >
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
5 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Copy from > select the size of the original document
Copying
60
4 Navigate to:
Copy to >
> select the tray containing the paper size and type you want to use >
> select the
number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >
5 If there are no trays that contain the paper size and type you want to use, then do the following:
a Navigate to:
Copy to >
> Manual Feeder >
> select the paper size >
> select the paper type >
b Load the size and type of paper into the multipurpose feeder, and then press
.
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow
button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
6 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Scale > adjust the scale setting > select the number of copies or enter a number on
the keypad >
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
4 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Making a copy lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in
the upper left corner.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying
61
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Darkness > adjust the darkness setting > select the number of copies or enter a number
on the keypad >
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
4 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Content Type > select the content type of the original document
4 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to one of the following:
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text and graphics or photos.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
5 Press the up or down arrow button until Content Source appears, and then press the left or right arrow
button to scroll to one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Press—The original document is from an offset press.
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Copying
62
6 Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press
.
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
7 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print
the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated
Not collated
To select a Collate setting:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Collate > select the collate setting you want > select the number of copies or enter a
number on the keypad >
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
4 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying
63
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Separator Sheets
4 Select Between Copies, Between Jobs, Between Pages, or Off.
5 Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press
.
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
6 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
To save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
• Make sure the paper size is set to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• The copy size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Paper Saver > select the setting that you want
4 Select Off, 2‑up Portrait, 2‑up Landscape, 4‑up Portrait, or 4‑up Landscape.
5 Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press
.
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
6 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Placing information on copies
Placing an overlay message on each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying
64
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Copy >
> Overlay > select an overlay message you want
4 Select Off, Confidential, Copy, Draft, Urgent, or Custom.
5 Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press
.
Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
6 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, press
.
2 When a list of copy jobs appears, select the job to cancel, and then press
3 Press
.
to go back to the home screen.
Understanding the copy options
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.
• To scroll to the paper size that matches the original document, press the left or right arrow button, and then
press
.
• To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, press the left or right
arrow button to scroll to Mixed Sizes, and then press
.
Copying
65
• To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, press the left or right arrow button
to scroll to Auto Size Sense, and then press
.
Copy to
This option lets you select the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• To scroll to the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder, press the left or
right arrow button, and then press
.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale
setting to accommodate the difference.
• If the paper type or size you want to use is not loaded in one of the trays, then press the left or right arrow
button to scroll to Manual Feeder, press
multipurpose feeder.
, and then manually load the paper in the manual feeder or
• To match each copy to the paper size of the original document, set “Copy to” to Auto Size Match. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper
in a tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set
automatic scaling.
• When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and
“Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are
copying.
• To decrease or increase the value by 1%, press the left or right arrow button on the printer control panel. To
make a continuous decrease or increase in value, press and hold the button for two or more seconds.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Content Type
This option lets you set the original document type.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Copying
66
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Content Source
This option lets you set the original document source.
Select from the following content sources:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Overlay
This option lets you create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose
from Confidential, Copy, Draft, Urgent, and Custom. You can type a custom message in the ”Enter the Custom
Text Overlay and press OK” field. The message will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Separator Sheets
This option lets you place a blank sheet of paper between copies, prints, pages, print jobs or copy jobs. The
separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper
your copies are printed on.
Paper Saver
This option lets you print two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also
called N-up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your
document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.
E-mailing
67
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Note: The ADF scans only one side of the sheet.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
E-mailing
68
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
4 Adjust the scan settings, if necessary.
5 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
E-mailing a document
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then press
4 Press
.
Canceling an e-mail
From the printer control panel, press
.
.
Faxing
69
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Note: The ADF scans only one side of the sheet.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
Notes:
• The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
• During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up
later, and then select Continue.
• The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending
or receiving a fax.
Faxing
70
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top
or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the
business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending
fax machine, business, other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded
Web Server, and then open the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax
setup information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax
capabilities, then the Fax Name or Station Name and Fax Number or Station Number screens appear:
1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes, and then
press
.
2 When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number, and then press
.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Settings menu, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes in the Fax Name or Station
Name field.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Setting up fax using a standard telephone line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
Faxing
71
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on a specified number of rings.
Faxing
72
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for
the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes
automatically.
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing
73
Connected to different wall jacks
PHONE
LINE
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering
machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to six.
Faxing
74
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
02
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
3 Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Notes:
• This setup works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax, and if you subscribe to a
distinctive ring service.
• When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the
telephone to receive the fax.
• You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically, but turn off the voice mail service when you
are expecting a fax.
Setting up fax using digital subscriber line
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Faxing
75
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Digital subscriber line (DSL) splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone
and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel.
To minimize interference between the two channels, ask for a DSL filter from your DSL provider.
1 Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
3 Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone port on the DSL filter.
Note: To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the telephone port of
the printer, and then connect the telephone.
Faxing
76
Setting up fax using VoIP telephone service
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge extra
cost for the activation of the second telephone port.
3 Connect the telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing
77
Notes:
• To check if the telephone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the port, and
then listen for a dial tone.
• If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay extra cost, then use a phone
splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port, and then plug the
printer and telephone into the splitter.
• To check the splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter, and then listen for a dial tone.
Setting up fax using cable modem connection
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
Faxing
78
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Note: To check if the telephone port on the cable modem is active, connect an analog telephone, and then
listen for a dial tone.
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Connect your analog telephone to the telephone port of the printer.
Setting up fax in countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Faxing
79
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility
is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or
region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug
from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.
Part name
Part number
Lexmark adapter plug
40X8519
Faxing
80
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ11 wall jack
LINE
EXT
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it
directly to the telephone adapter.
Faxing
81
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering
machines. The F port is for telephones. Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
N F N
PHONE
LINE
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
3 If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices
as shown.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone
number is assigned a different ring pattern.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls
> Answer On.
2 Select the ring pattern.
3 Apply the changes.
Faxing
82
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 From the Fax Settings menu, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes in the Fax Name or Station
Name field.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then
you may have to reset the date and time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Other Settings area > Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: We recommend using the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
Set the printer to automatically adjust for daylight saving time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom
Time Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.
Faxing
83
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Fax >
> enter a fax or shortcut number on the keypad >
> Original Size >
Note: If you want to fax another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow
button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press
.
4 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press
.
Sending a fax using the computer
For Windows users
1 From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print dialog.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers.
4 If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5 Apply the changes, and then send the fax job.
Notes:
• The fax option is available only with the PostScript® driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For more
information, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
• To use the fax option with the PostScript driver, configure and enable it in the Configuration tab.
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select the printer.
3 Enter the recipient fax number, and then configure other fax settings, if necessary.
4 Send the fax job.
Faxing
84
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999)
can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press # , and then enter the shortcut number on the keypad.
4 Press
.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly into the ADF tray.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Fax >
to be sent >
4 Press
> enter the fax number > Delayed Send > Send Later > select the date you want the fax
> select the time you want the fax to be sent >
.
Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded
Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Faxing
85
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
3 Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
• To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
• Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Fax >
> enter the fax number > Resolution > select the resolution you want
Note: You can choose from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed and best quality).
4 Press
.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Faxing
86
3 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Fax >
> enter the fax number >
> Darkness > adjust the darkness of the fax >
Viewing a fax log
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax names of specific fax callers you want to
block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax job while the original documents are still scanning
• If you are using the ADF tray and Scanning page appears, then press
.
• If you are using the scanner glass and Scanning page, Scan the Next Page, or Finish the Job
appears, then press
.
Canceling a fax job after scanning the original documents
1 From the printer control panel, press
.
2 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to the job you want to cancel.
Faxing
87
3 Press
> Delete Selected Jobs.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released
manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select Off, Always On, Manual, or Scheduled.
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5 In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.
Faxing
88
Understanding the fax options
Original Size
This option lets you choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.
1 From the Fax area of the printer control panel, press the Options button.
Original Size appears.
2 Press
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until the size of the original document appears, and then press
.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size
and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Select one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Content Type
This option lets you set the original document type.
Select from the following content types:
• Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
• Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Content Source
This option lets you set the original document source.
Select from the following content sources:
• Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Faxing
•
•
•
•
•
•
89
Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Orientation
This option lets you specify the orientation of the original document, and then change the Sides and Binding
settings to match the orientation.
Binding
This option lets you specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scanning
90
Scanning
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Note: The ADF scans only one side of the sheet.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address
may be sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination
becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination
could also be another PostScript printer.
Creating shortcuts
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system
support person.
Scanning
91
4 Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Press
.
Scanning to a computer
Scanning to a computer
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
5 Type a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number is automatically assigned when you click Submit. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Scanning
92
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light turns on when the paper is loaded properly.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
c From the printer control panel, press #, and then type the shortcut number using the keypad, or press
the up or down arrow button to scroll to Held Jobs, and then press the up or down arrow button to scroll
to Profiles.
After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or
program you specified. If you selected Profiles on the printer control panel, then locate your shortcut
on the list.
8 View the file from the computer.
The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Understanding the printer menus
93
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu
Reports
Network/Ports
Security
Settings
Default Source
Menu Settings Page
Active NIC
Confidential Print
General Settings
Paper Size/Type
Device Statistics
Security Audit Log
Copy Settings
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Network Setup Page1 SMTP Setup
Set Date and Time
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
Paper Texture
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Paper Weight
Fax Call Log
Paper Loading
Copy Shortcuts
Custom Types
Custom Scan Sizes
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
Universal Setup
FTP Shortcuts
Standard
Network2
FTP Settings
Print Settings
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Asset Report
Help
Manage Shortcuts
Print All Guides
Fax Shortcuts
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Fax Guide
Copy Shortcuts
FTP Guide
Profile Shortcuts
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
1
Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.
2
Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
Understanding the printer menus
94
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use
To
Default Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for MP Feeder
to appear as a menu setting.
• If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use
To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of the paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
• If the same size and type of paper are loaded in two trays and the
tray settings for paper size and type match, then the trays are
automatically linked. The multipurpose feeder may also be linked.
When one tray is empty, the job prints using paper from the linked
tray.
• A6 is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x]
is the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom
Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus
95
Use
To
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the size of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP
Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
The paper size value must be set.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” in order for
MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus
96
Use
To
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of the paper being manually loaded.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of the envelope being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” in order for
Manual Paper Type to appear as a menu item.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus
97
Configure MP menu
Use
To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper
source.
Substitute Size menu
Use
To
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not
available.
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use
To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
98
Use
To
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if the custom type is supported.
Understanding the printer menus
Paper Weight menu
Use
To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
99
Understanding the printer menus
100
Use
To
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use
To
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Notes:
• Duplex sets two‑sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one‑sided printing is set from Printing
Preferences or Print dialog.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided jobs.
• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Understanding the printer menus
101
Use
To
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Duplex sets two‑sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one‑sided printing is set from Printing
Preferences or Print dialog.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided jobs.
• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Custom Types menu
Use
To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom
type name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded
Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Understanding the printer menus
102
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use
To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Height
Orientation
2 scans per side
Off
On
Specify a custom scan size name, size, and page orientation.
Notes:
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting for Width.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting for Height.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Universal Setup menu
Use
To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Portrait Width
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
• Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
• 14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either
direction.
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than
the maximum width supported in the tray.
Understanding the printer menus
103
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use
To
Menu Settings Page
Print a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays,
installed memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network
connection, and other information.
Device Statistics
Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and
details about printed pages.
Network Setup Page
Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers
connected to print servers.
Shortcut List
Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log
Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On
in the Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log
Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On
in the Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts
Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List
Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set
in the printer.
Asset Report
Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial
number and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that
can be scanned into an asset database.
Understanding the printer menus
104
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use
To
Active NIC
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
[list of available network cards]
• This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use
To
Energy Efficient Ethernet
Enable
Disable
Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the
Ethernet network.
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Understanding the printer menus
Use
105
To
Network Buffer
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Auto
Notes:
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a
wireless network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use
To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP
address.
Understanding the printer menus
106
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use
To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed
View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
0, 10–225 seconds
Notes:
• “90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use
To
Set Hostname
Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address
View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto
IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on
systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask
View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway
View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
107
Use
To
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File
Transfer Protocol.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
WINS Server Address
View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
DNS Server Address
View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address
View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use
To
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
108
Use
To
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic
IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Set Hostname
Set the host name.
View Address
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless
network adapter attached.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Wireless
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use
To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network connection and enable network
security.
Notes:
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network
when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point
with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
• Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Choose Network
Select an available network for the printer to use.
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
109
Use
To
View Signal Quality
View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode
View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use
To
Activate
Yes
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
View Name
Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address
Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the
network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
SMTP Setup menu
Use
To
Primary SMTP Gateway
Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying
to send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address
Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by
the printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to
the SMTP server.
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server
determines if SSL will be used.
Understanding the printer menus
110
Use
To
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges.
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Notes:
Device Userid
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail.
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the
Device Password
SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
Security menu
Security Audit Log menu
Use
To
Export Log
Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:
• To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must
be attached to the printer.
• The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and
saved on a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log
and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No
is the factory default setting.
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the
remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
• If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event
is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
111
Set Date and Time menu
Use
To
Current Date and Time
View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time
[input date/time]
Enter the date and time.
Notes:
• Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.
• The wizard lets you set the date and time in YYYY‑MM‑DD‑HH:MM
format.
Time Zone
[list of time zones]
Select the time zone.
Automatically observe DST
On
Off
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end
times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Note: GMT is the factory default settings.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time.
Understanding the printer menus
112
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use
To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text that appears on the display.
Show Supply Estimates
Show estimates
Do not show estimates
View supply estimates on the control panel, Embedded Web
Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Enable an ADF beep sound when loading paper.
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduce printer noise.
Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may
need to install special hardware for some languages.
Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Setting Eco‑Mode to Energy or may affect printer
performance, but not print quality.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
113
Use
To
Run Initial Setup
Yes
No
Run the setup wizard.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: US is the factory default setting.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
Bookmarks
Jobs by User
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
One Page Copy
Off
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specify whether to allow image background removal.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job Level
Page Level
Specify how to reload a scanned job when a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
Select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Notes:
• Do not display is the factory default setting for Change
Language, Fax shortcuts, E‑mail shortcuts, FTP shortcuts,
Bookmarks, and Jobs by user.
• Display is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax,
Search Held Jobs, and Held Jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Job Level is the factory default setting.
Select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control.
• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm.
Understanding the printer menus
114
Use
To
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep
Mode.
Notes:
• 20 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to
Off.
Timeouts
Print with Display Off
Allow printing with display off
Display on when printing
Print a job with the display turned off.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate mode when there is an active
Ethernet connection.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the idle time before the display returns to Ready state.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the
specified amount of time.
Note: Display on when printing is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in
the printer is printed.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL
emulation.
Understanding the printer menus
115
Use
To
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the time the printer waits to receive for more data before
canceling a print job.
Notes:
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Automatically reboot the printer.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1‑20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain
offline situations when these are not resolved within the
specified time period.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
Off
Set the printer to check for jammed paper.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Set the printer to print the correct output for a page.
Accessibility Settings
Speech Rate
Very Slow
Slow
Normal
Fast
Faster
Very Fast
Rapid
Very Rapid
Fastest
Adjust the Voice Guidance speaking rate.
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless other tasks need the memory required
to hold pages.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
116
Use
To
Accessibility Settings
Headphone Volume
1–10
Set the headphones volume.
Information Sent to Lexmark
Supplies and Page Usage (Anonymous)
On
Off
Send anonymous device usage information to Lexmark.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long
press of the Sleep button.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer factory default settings.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: The default value depends on what you selected
during the initial setup.
Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
• All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted.
Custom Home Message
Off
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text 1
Select a custom home message that appears as an alternating
display of the printer status.
Export Configuration Package
Export
Export the configuration package to a flash drive.
Export Compressed Logs File
Export
Export the compressed logs file to a flash drive.
Copy Settings menu
Use
To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
117
Use
To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then
specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• The ADF scans only one side of the sheet.
• 1 sided to 1 sided is the factory default setting. This setting is selected
when using a one‑sided original document for a one‑sided copy job.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Specify whether a border is printed.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
118
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
MP Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Number of Copies
1–999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
119
Use
To
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Custom Overlay
Specify the custom overlay text.
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Auto Center
Off
On
Automatically align the content at the center of the page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge‑to‑edge.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
120
Use
To
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use
To
Fax Name
Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number
Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset.
Note: Fax Number is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax
function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax
jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed.
Caller ID
Off
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Note: Equal is the factory default setting.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
121
Use
To
Fax Number Masking
Off
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask
setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
Include Message Field
On
Off
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Configure the fax cover page.
Notes:
• Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
• Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Fax Send Settings
Use
To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
122
Use
To
Original Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Content Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Graphics
Specify the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Dial Prefix
Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified
number.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial Frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
123
Use
To
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Driver to Fax
Yes
No
Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specify the dialing sound.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
124
Use
To
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Scan Edge to Edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge‑to‑edge.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never Use
Always Use
Enable color faxing.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On
Off
Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off by default is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Use
To
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Enable Caller ID
On
Off
Allow the printer to show caller ID.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Auto Answer
Yes
No
Set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
Manual Answer Code
0–9
Enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• *9* is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Understanding the printer menus
125
Use
To
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the
designated fax source.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Fax Footer
On
Off
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received
fax.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Forward to Shortcut
Enter the shortcut number that matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, or
LDSS).
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no fax ID specified.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Fax is the factory default setting.
• This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
126
Fax Log Settings
Use
To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a received error log following a receive error.
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or fax name returned.
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Use
To
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Set the speaker volume to high or low.
Ringer Volume
Off
On
Enable or disable the ringer volume.
Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until
the fax connection is made.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
127
Answer On
Use
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
To
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use
To
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the format of the scanned file.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
Note: E-mails larger than the specified size are not sent.
Notes:
• PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
• To use the RTF (.rtf) or TXT (.txt) option, purchase and install the
AccuRead OCR solution.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
• To use the Searchable PDF option, purchase and install the AccuRead
OCR solution.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
128
Use
To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the document being scanned.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
129
Use
To
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of
the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Use Multi‑page Tiff
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of
the job.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each e‑mail job.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images
when Color is set to Off.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the email destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
130
Use
To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use
To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Notes:
• PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
• To use the RTF (.rtf) or TXT (.txt) option, purchase and install the
AccuRead OCR solution.
Understanding the printer menus
131
Use
To
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF.
Secure PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
• To use the Searchable PDF option, purchase and install the AccuRead
OCR solution.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
132
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of
the image.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the image quality and the file size.
• 90 produces the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to the file size and quality of
the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files.
For a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of
the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
133
Use
To
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
FTP Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color
threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of the scanned image.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
134
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use
To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
PPDS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
• PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
• This does not prevent a software program from sending
print jobs that use another printer language.
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Resource Save
On
Off
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such
as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer
receives a job that requires more memory than what is
available.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting
to print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then
Memory Full [38] appears and downloads are not
deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which confidential and held jobs are
printed when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
135
Finishing menu
Use
To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the user default setting for
all print jobs.
Notes:
• “1 sided” is the factory default setting.
• You can set two‑sided printing from the software program.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or
Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way two‑sided pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether or not blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether or not blank separator sheets are inserted.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after
all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job.
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting
blank pages in a document.
Understanding the printer menus
136
Use
To
Separator Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheet.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder to
appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper
Saver.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so
that the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation in which pages are printed on a single sheet.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between
portrait and landscape.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use
To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
137
Use
To
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images
horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps,
electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click
File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
• To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer
IP address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve
toner by lightening the output.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
138
Utilities menu
Use
To
Format Flash
Yes
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash
memory is being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory
card in the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Activate Hex Trace
Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The
estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use
To
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use
To
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
139
PostScript menu
Use
To
Print PS Error
On
Off
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Enable the SysStart file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emul menu
Use
To
Font Source
Resident
Download
All
Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.
Notes:
• “Resident” is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default
set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• “All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and where it is stored.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 10U PC‑8 is the U.S. factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the
international factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters,
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different
languages or specific programs, such as math symbols for scientific
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or
decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100.00
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
This can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the
display but cannot be changed.
Understanding the printer menus
140
Use
To
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the
page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
• 60 is the U.S. factory default setting. 64 is the international default
setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing
of eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
141
Use
To
Tray Renumber
Assign Multipurpose Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Envelope
Off
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Notes:
• “Off” is the factory default setting.
• “None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option
appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
• “0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Show the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
PPDS menu
Menu item
Description
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the orientation of the text and graphics on the page
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting.
• Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Understanding the printer menus
142
Menu item
Description
Lines per Page
1–255
Sets the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
• 64 is the factory default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
Lines per Inch
0.25–30.00
Sets the number of lines that print per inch
Notes:
• 6 is the factory default setting.
• Lines per Inch can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑inch
increments
Page Format
Print
Whole
Sets the logical and physical printable area of the page
Notes:
• Print is the factory default setting. Print data maintains its position
with respect to edge of the paper.
• When Whole is selected, document margins are calculated from the
top left corner of the physical edge of the page.
• Printing does not occur outside the printable area.
Character Set
1
2
Specifies a default character set for PPDS print jobs
Notes:
• 2 is the factory default setting. Character Set 2 is composed of
printable characters and symbols used in non‑US English languages.
• When Characters Set 1 is selected, values given to the printer are
interpreted as printer commands.
Best Fit
On
Off
Replaces a missing font with a similar font
Tray 1 Renumber
Off
Tray 2
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Note: On is the factory default setting. If the requested font is not found,
the printer will use a similar font.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Tray 2 is displayed only when it is installed.
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Understanding the printer menus
143
Menu item
Description
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after
a carriage return (CR) control command
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
HTML menu
Use
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
To
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do
not specify a font.
Use
To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Understanding the printer menus
144
Use
To
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use
To
Auto Fit
On
Off
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation
settings for some images.
Invert
On
Off
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus
145
Help menu
Menu item
Description
Print All Guides
Prints all the guides
Copy Guide
Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide
Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide
Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide
Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Print Defects Guide
Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality
defects, and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality
Information Guide
Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide
Provides information about ordering supplies
Saving money and the environment
146
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their
impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce
materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This
chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can
significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such
as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode”
on page 146.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced
specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer,
see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 46.
Conserving supplies
• Print on both sides of the paper.
Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
Use Eco‑Mode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer's environmental impact.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
you want
> Settings >
> General Settings >
> Eco‑Mode >
> select the setting
Saving money and the environment
147
Use
To
Off
Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. This setting supports
the performance specifications for your printer.
Energy
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
• Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay
before the first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper
2 Press
• Enable automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing.
• Turn off print log features.
.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet mode to reduce the printer noise.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Settings >
> General Settings >
> Quiet Mode >
2 Select a setting.
Use
To
On
Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
• Print jobs process at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a
document is ready to print. There is a short delay
before the first page is printed.
• The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned off.
• The printer ignores the Advance Start command.
Off
Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3 Press
.
Saving money and the environment
148
Adjusting Sleep mode
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Settings >
> General Settings >
> Timeouts >
> Sleep Mode >
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power saving mode.
Notes:
• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> Settings >
> General Settings >
2 Select Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button, and then press
3 Press Hibernate >
.
.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Saving money and the environment
149
Using Schedule Power Modes
Schedule Power Modes lets the user schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into the
Ready state.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.
3 From the Action menu, select the power mode.
4 From the Time menu, select the time.
5 From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.
6 Click Add.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more
information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Select the product you want to recycle.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark Collection and Recycling Program may be
recycled through your local recycling center.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are
transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to
dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource
savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist
in your area.
Saving money and the environment
150
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle
the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to Lexmark for reuse
or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or
demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Select the product that you want to recycle.
Securing the printer
151
Securing the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory
Description
Volatile memory
Your printer uses standard random access memory
(RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print
jobs.
Non-volatile memory
Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store operating system, device settings, and network
information.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•
•
•
•
•
The printer is being decommissioned.
The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
The printer is being sold to another organization.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buffered data, simply turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase
information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully powered up, the printer displays a list of functions.
3 Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe All Settings appears.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the
printer memory.
4 Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
Securing the printer
152
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Maintaining the printer
153
Maintaining the printer
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the printer
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
Notes:
• Perform this task after every few months.
• Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.
1 Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Wipe the outside of the printer with a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth.
Notes:
• Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
• Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.
5 Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
Maintaining the printer
Cleaning the scanner glass
1 Open the scanner cover.
2 Wipe the areas shown with a damp, soft, lint-free cloth.
1
White underside of the scanner cover
2
Scanner glass
3
Automatic document feeder (ADF) glass
4
White underside of the ADF cover
3 Close the scanner cover.
154
Maintaining the printer
155
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Status/Supplies >
> View Supplies >
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy
may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings,
and other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption
is different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing
or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial
estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization*
test methods and page content.
* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
Maintaining the printer
156
Ordering supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark
authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
The Lexmark Return Program lets you purchase Lexmark supplies at a discounted price in exchange for your
agreement to use the supplies only once and return them only to Lexmark for remanufacturing or recycling.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use
of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies
or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and
parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
MX310 Return program cartridges
European
Economic
Area (EEA+)
Rest of
Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
(RoEMEA)
Latin America Rest of Asia Australia and
Distribution Pacific (RoAP) New Zealand
(ANZ)
(LAD)
Item
United States
and Canada
Toner
cartridge
60F1000
60F2000
60F5000
60F4000
60F3000
60F3000
High yield
60F1H00
toner cartridge
60F2H00
60F5H00
60F4H00
60F3H00
60F3000
For more information on countries located in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
MX310 Regular cartridges
Item
Worldwide
High yield toner cartridge
60F0HA0
For more information on countries located in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
Maintaining the printer
157
MX317 Return program cartridges
Item
United States
and Canada
Toner
cartridge
51B1000
European
Economic
Area (EEA+)
51B2000
Rest of
Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
(RoEMEA)
51B5000
Latin America Rest of Asia Australia and
Distribution Pacific (RoAP) New Zealand
(ANZ)
(LAD)
51B4000
51B3000
51B6000
For more information on countries located in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
MX317 Regular cartridges
Item
Worldwide
Toner cartridge
51B00A0
For more information on countries located in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to
exhaustion of toner from toner cartridge.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name
Lexmark Return Program
Regular
Imaging unit
500Z
500ZA
Ordering a maintenance kit
Notes:
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator roller, fuser, pick rollers, transfer roller, and redrive assembly are all included in the
maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
• Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit.
Maintenance kit
Part number
100‑V maintenance kit*
40X9146
110‑V maintenance kit
40X9135
220‑V maintenance kit
40X9136
* This is available only in Japan.
Ordering an ADF separator pad
Order an ADF separator pad when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time.
For information on replacing the ADF separator pad, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
Maintaining the printer
158
Part name
Part number
Separator pad
40X6247
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing
until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct sunlight
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.
Maintaining the printer
159
2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.
3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then remove all packing materials.
4 Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner.
5 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
6 Close the front door.
Maintaining the printer
Replacing the imaging unit
1 Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.
2 Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.
3 Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.
160
Maintaining the printer
161
4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
5 Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the
arrows on the side rails inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer
162
7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
8 Close the front door.
Moving the printer
Moving the printer to another location
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•
•
•
•
Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then lift the printer off the
trays. Do not try to lift the printer and the trays at the same time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Maintaining the printer
• Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
Note: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
163
Managing the printer
164
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator
information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced
system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded
Web Server — Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Accessing the remote control panel
The remote control panel on your computer screen lets you interact with the printer control panel, even when
you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status
and do print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP
section. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Press Enter to open the Web page of your printer.
3 Click Applications.
Note: The remote control panel requires a Java plug‑in to launch.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low, when the paper needs to be
changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings.
3 From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Managing the printer
165
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status
of the printer, network, and supplies.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
• Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
• All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable
alerts can be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply
conditions.
• The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3 From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification
Description
Off
The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only
The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning
The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status
of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
1
The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2
The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
Managing the printer
166
Notification
Description
Continuable Stop1
The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply
must be replaced to continue printing.
1
The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2
The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4 Click Submit.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 28.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the
Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 151.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in the
printer hard disk are not affected.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
>
> Settings >
> General Settings >
> Factory Defaults >
> Restore Now
Clearing jams
167
Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media and load them properly to avoid most jams. If jams occur, then follow
the steps outlined in this chapter.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use any tool to remove a jam. Doing so could permanently damage the
fuser.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure that the paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
• Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
Clearing jams
168
• Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against the paper or
envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.
• Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
•
•
•
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Identifying jam locations
Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed
page is cleared. Check your printed output stack for discarded pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.
1
2
3
4
5
7
Jam location
1
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2
Standard bin
3
Front door
4
Multipurpose feeder
6
Clearing jams
169
Jam location
5
Duplex unit
6
Trays
7
Rear door
Paper jam in the front door
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
Clearing jams
3 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny photoconductor drum under the imaging unit.
Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.
4 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
5 Insert the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows inside the printer as guides.
170
Clearing jams
171
6 Insert the toner cartridge.
7 Close the front door.
8 If necessary, press
on the control panel.
Paper jam in the rear door
1 Open the rear door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Clearing jams
172
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the rear door.
4 If necessary, press
on the control panel.
Paper jam in the standard bin
1 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams
2 If necessary, press
173
on the control panel.
Paper jam in the duplex unit
1 Remove the tray.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams
174
3 Insert the tray.
4 From the control panel, press
.
Paper jam in trays
1 Remove the tray.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Insert the tray.
4 If necessary, press
on the control panel.
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder
1 Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams
175
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
4 Reload paper, and then adjust the paper guide.
5 If necessary, press
on the control panel.
Clearing jams
176
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2 Open the ADF cover.
3 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the ADF cover.
5 If necessary, press
from the control panel.
Troubleshooting
177
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]
Use only a supported toner cartridge and imaging unit.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, go to www.lexmark.com.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then verify that the paper size and type settings are
specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper.
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified
in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified
in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified
in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
• Cancel the print job.
to confirm.
Troubleshooting
178
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
• Select Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Select Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Select Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further
for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.
• Select Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
• Install additional printer memory.
to confirm.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following possible changes in the printer:
•
•
•
•
The printer firmware has been updated.
The tray for the print job is removed.
The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different
printer model.
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
Troubleshooting
179
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person or see the “Setting up the printer to fax” section of the User’s Guide.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support
person.
Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Troubleshooting
180
Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.
Try either of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact
your system support person.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order an imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the "Replacing supplies"
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Note: The paper source can be a tray or a feeder.
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct size of paper in the paper source.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and print using a different paper
source. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
•
•
•
•
to confirm.
Check the length and width guides of the paper source and make sure the paper is loaded properly.
Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.
Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
Make sure that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if Multipurpose Feeder Size is set to
Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the print job.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Troubleshooting
181
Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin
collating the rest of the print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save,
clear the message, and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom string] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press
to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom type name] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press
to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
182
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper size] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct paper size.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press
to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press
to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting
183
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
• To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, select Finished loading paper on
the printer control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer
support, and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
Maintenance kit very low [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support
at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Troubleshooting
184
Memory full, cannot print faxes
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message without printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer restarts.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Install additional printer memory.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or imaging unit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of thirdparty supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging
components. For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 156.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable
results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage.
Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your
printer, press and hold
and the # button on the control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.
Troubleshooting
185
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to clear the message and continue printing.
and
on the control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and
install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to www.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
PPDS font error [50]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• If the printer cannot find the requested font, then from the printer control panel, navigate to:
PPDS menu > Best Fit > On
The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.
• Cancel the current print job.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch
printer models, press
to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
to confirm.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
• Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, then install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the toner cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section.
• If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove and reinstall the unresponsive toner cartridge.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the toner cartridge. The
cartridge may be defective or a non‑genuine Lexmark supply. For more information, see “Using
genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 156.
Troubleshooting
186
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and
resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then select Continue on the printer control panel. For
non-touch-screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
• Select Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Select Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job.
• Select Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job.
• Select Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Select Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
• For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer
region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
Printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number
Region
0
Global
1
United States, Canada
2
European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3
Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4
Latin America
5
Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9
Invalid
Notes:
• The x and y values represent .xy in the code that appears on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]
Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting
187
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
• Select Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Select Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last
successful scan job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Select Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful
scan job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Select Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press
to confirm.
• Select Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Replace maintenance kit [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or
contact your service representative, and then report the message.
Replace missing fuser [31.xyz]
Install the missing fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Replace missing imaging unit [31.xy]
Install the missing imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Troubleshooting
188
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark cartridge, such as a high yield cartridge, that
is not intended to be used in this product.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark toner cartridge is installed:
32.13
32.16
32.19
32.22
32.25
32.28
32.31
32.34
32.37
For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 156.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark imaging unit, such as a MICR unit, that is not
intended to be used in this product.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark imaging unit is installed:
32.14
32.17
32.20
32.23
32.26
32.29
32.32
32.35
32.38
For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 156.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting
189
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02]
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system
support person.
• Select Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
• For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Turn off the printer and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting
190
Standard USB port disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
Notes:
• The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
• Install the missing supply to complete the job.
• Cancel the current job.
The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled
or provide unexpected results.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
Too many flash options installed [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
to confirm.
Troubleshooting
191
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
• “Basic printer problems” on page 191
• “Hardware and internal option problems” on page 193
• “Paper feed problems” on page 195
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Turn on the printer.
Press the Sleep
button to wake the
printer from Sleep
mode or Hibernate
mode.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and
the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Troubleshooting
Action
192
Yes
No
Go to step 5.
Unplug the other
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet. electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
Does other electrical equipment work?
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Step 4
Step 5
Go to step 6.
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are
inserted in the correct ports.
Make sure to match
the following:
• The USB symbol
on the cable with
the USB symbol
on the printer
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
• The appropriate
Ethernet cable
with the Ethernet
port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or
breaker.
Turn on the switch or Go to step 7.
reset the breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Step 8
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the
printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Step 9
Go to step 10.
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any
packing material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer
driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11.
Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the
hardware options,
and then turn on the
printer.
Use correct printer
driver settings.
Troubleshooting
193
Action
Yes
No
Step 11
Go to step 12.
Install the correct
printer driver.
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Step 12
The problem is
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn solved.
the printer back on.
Contact customer
support.
Is the printer working?
Printer display is blank
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn solved.
the printer back on.
Step 2
Turn off the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
Hardware and internal option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action
Yes
The problem is
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn solved.
on the printer.
Step 1
No
Go to step 2.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller
board.
a Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the
power cord from the electrical outlet.
b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate
connector in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly
grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3.
Connect the internal
option to the
controller board.
Troubleshooting
194
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
Go to step 4.
Reinstall the internal
option.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
Step 2
a Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn solved.
the printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal
option is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Step 4
a Check if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the
printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see “Adding available options in the print driver”
on page 24.
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
Tray problems
• Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure
that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
b Check if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
Is the tray working?
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4.
Reinstall the tray. For
more information,
see the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Troubleshooting
195
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Yes
No
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to
make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 24.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action
a Turn on jam recovery.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Jam
Recovery
2 Select On or Auto.
3 Depending on your printer model, press
or touch
Submit.
b Resend the pages that did not print.
Were the jammed pages reprinted?
Paper frequently jams
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
• Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of
the paper.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
• Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and
type.
b Insert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Troubleshooting
196
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Go to step 3.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Yes
No
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Step 3
a Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 167.
b Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action
a Do either of the following:
• For touch‑screen printer models, touch
or Done.
• For non‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next >
Clear the jam, press OK >
.
b Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Does the paper jam message remain?
>
Troubleshooting
197
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Incorrect characters print
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Deactivate Hex
Trace mode.
Go to step 2.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Yes
No
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off
the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
b Resend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action
Step 1
The problem is
a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray. solved.
Go to step 2.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Step 2
The problem is
a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper solved.
size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
Step 3
solved.
a Depending on your operating system, open Printing
Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting
198
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
a Check if the trays are not linked.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set
Collate to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).”
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
Large jobs do not collate
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Step 2
a From the printer software, set Collate to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).”
Note: Setting Collate to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” in the software
overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number solved.
and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the
number of pages in the job.
Step 3
Contact customer
support.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action
Yes
Step 1
The problem is
a Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed solved.
all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with
Adobe Acrobat.
b Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
No
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting
199
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Yes
No
b Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
Print jobs do not print
Action
Step 1
The problem is
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog solved.
and check if you have selected the correct printer.
Go to step 2.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must
select the printer for each document that you want to print.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Step 2
The problem is
a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready solved.
appears on the printer display.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 3.
Do the jobs print?
Step 3
The problem is
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the solved.
message.
Go to step 4.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
Step 4
The problem is
a Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if solved.
the cables are securely connected to the computer and the
printer.
Go to step 5.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
Step 5
a Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the solved.
printer back on.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting
200
Action
Yes
No
Step 6
a Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 24.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity solved.
of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then
resend the job
Go to step 3.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
b Resend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
Print job takes longer than expected
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
b Select Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
Step 2
Did the job print?
Step 3
a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Step 4
a Disable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect
> Off
b Resend the print job.
Did the job print?
Troubleshooting
Action
201
Yes
Step 5
The problem is
a Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server solved.
are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
b Resend the print job.
No
Contact customer
support.
Did the job print?
Printing slows down
Notes:
• When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
• The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated
temperatures.
Action
Yes
Step 1
The problem is
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the solved.
fuser type.
No
Go to step 2.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and
a 220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
Step 2
The problem is
a Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, solved.
see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b Resend the print job.
Contact customer
support.
Does the print speed increase?
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
• The trays can detect paper length.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the
Paper Size/Type menu.
Troubleshooting
202
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the
same size and type.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
• Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
• Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
Step 2
a From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be
linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be
linked.
b Resend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
Unexpected page breaks occur
Adjust the print timeout settings.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Print Timeout
b Select a higher setting and then, depending on your printer
model, select
or Submit.
c Resend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
Step 2
a Check the original file for manual page breaks.
b Resend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
Troubleshooting
203
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are
supported by the printer.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Go to step 2.
Select a font that is
supported by the
printer.
Menus > Reports > Print Fonts
2 Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
b Resend the print job.
Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?
The problem is
Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the solved.
printer.
Step 2
Contact customer
support.
Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Is the page or image clipped?
Troubleshooting
204
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of
the following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 4.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Is the page or image clipped?
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Action
Yes
Step 1
The problem is
a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the solved.
fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and
a 220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
No
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting
205
Action
Yes
Step 2
The problem is
a Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, solved.
see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
b Resend the print job.
No
Contact customer
support.
Do compressed images still appear?
Gray background on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
Step 1
The problem is
a From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease solved.
the toner darkness.
No
Go to step 2.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Step 2
Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
a Remove the toner cartridge.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
b Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light can cause print quality problems.
c Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
d Resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
Troubleshooting
206
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
No
The problem is
solved.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 3
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 4.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Troubleshooting
207
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper size loaded.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of
the following:
Are the margins correct?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu
to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting
208
Paper curl
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Adjust the width and
length guides.
Go to step 3.
Specify the paper
type and weight from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 4
a Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
Go to step 5.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Print irregularities
Leading edge
)
)
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting
209
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Specify the paper
size and type from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper
loaded in the tray?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 5.
Step 4
From the printer
control
panel,
set
the
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Go to step 6.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Troubleshooting
210
Print is too dark
Action
Yes
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the
toner darkness.
No
The problem is
solved.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Do one or more of
the following:
• Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper type,
texture and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 5.
From the printer
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes. control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Step 4
Troubleshooting
211
Action
Yes
No
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Go to step 6.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase
the toner darkness.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Change the paper
type, texture, and
weight to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Print is too light
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting
212
Action
Yes
Step 4
Go to step 5.
From the printer
control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 5
a Load paper from a fresh package.
No
Go to step 6.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 7.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 6
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting
213
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
2 Check if the packing material is properly removed from the
imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 2
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Printer is printing solid black pages
Troubleshooting
214
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Repeating defects appear on prints
Measure the distance between the defects.
Check for a distance between the defects that equals:
• 97 mm (3.82 in.)
• 47 mm (1.85 in.)
• 38 mm (1.5 in.)
Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed
measurements?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do the repeating defects still appear?
1 Check if the
distance
between the
defects equal to
80 mm (3.15 in.)
2 Take note of the
distance, and
then contact
customer
support at
http://support.l
exmark.com or
your service
representative.
Contact customer
The problem is
solved.
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
Troubleshooting
215
Shadow images appear on prints
Leading edge
A
AB
BC
CD
D
A
B
C
D
ABCD
Trailing edge
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Load paper with the
correct paper type
and weight in the
tray.
Go to step 3.
Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified
in the tray settings.
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Skewed print
)E
) D
ABC
E
ABCD E
ABCD
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting
216
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
b Resend the print job.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Yes
No
Is the print still skewed?
Step 2
a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the
tray.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Change the paper
type and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Go to step 4.
The problem is
solved.
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Troubleshooting
217
Action
Yes
No
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Go to step 5.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Yes
No
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
Leading edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting
218
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
Go to step 3.
Do one or more of
the following:
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
• Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
• Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Go to step 4.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 4
a Reinstall the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2 Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Troubleshooting
219
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Yes
No
Reinstall the imaging unit.
a Remove, and then install the imaging unit.
b Resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading appear on prints?
Toner rubs off
Leading edge
ABC
DEF
Trailing edge
Action
Step 1
Go to step 2.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type, texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in
the tray?
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub off?
Contact customer
support.
Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting
220
Toner specks appear on prints
Action
Yes
No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Transparency print quality is poor
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Step 2
Contact customer
a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency. support.
The problem is
solved.
b Resend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Uneven print density
Action
Yes
No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Is the print density uneven?
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting
Action
221
Yes
Step 1
Go to step 2.
a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
No
The problem is
solved.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 2
Go to step 3.
a From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
b Resend the print job.
The problem is
solved.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 3
Go to step 4.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 4
a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2 Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3 Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
b Resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Solving copy problems
•
•
•
•
“Copier does not respond” on page 222
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 222
“Poor copy quality” on page 222
“Partial document or photo copies” on page 224
Troubleshooting
222
Copier does not respond
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
The problem is
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn solved.
it back on.
Contact customer
support.
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
Scanner unit does not close
Action
Yes
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and The problem is
the printer.
solved.
a Lift the scanner unit.
No
Contact customer
support.
b Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
Poor copy quality
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Increase the scan
resolution setting for
a higher‑quality
output.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Troubleshooting
223
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
Go to step 4.
See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 154.
Go to step 5.
See “Print quality
problems” on
page 203.
Go to step 6.
Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Go to step 7.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Go to step 8.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 9.
The problem is
solved.
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and
the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
a From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
b From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
c If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content
Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Step 7
Check for patterns on print.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Copy > Sharpness > select a lower setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
b Resend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
a From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:
• Sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.
• Contrast—Increase the contrast setting.
b Resend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Troubleshooting
224
Action
Yes
No
Step 9
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Go to step 3.
Change the paper
size setting to match
the paper loaded in
the tray, or load the
tray with paper that
matches the paper
size setting.
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
a From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:
• Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
• Darkness—Increase the current setting.
b Resend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Partial document or photo copies
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper
loaded in the tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the
Paper Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in
the tray.
Step 3
The problem is
a Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, solved.
specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print
dialog.
b Resend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
Solving fax problems
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Fax function is not set up” on page 225
“Caller ID is not shown” on page 225
“Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 226
“Can send but not receive faxes” on page 228
“Can receive but not send faxes” on page 229
“Received fax has poor print quality” on page 230
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting
225
Fax function is not set up
Before completing these instructions for network printers, check if the fax cables are connected.
Note: The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax.
Action
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings >
> General Settings >
Yes
No
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Yes
No
> Run initial
setup >
>
b Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer
display.
c Select a language, and then press
.
d Select a country or region, and then press
.
e Select a time zone, and then press
.
f Press the up or down arrow button to scroll to Fax, and then
press
.
Is the fax function set up?
Caller ID is not shown
Action
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line The problem is
is subscribed to the caller ID service.
solved.
Notes:
• If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you
may have to change the default setting. There are two
settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
• The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
• Contact your telephone company to determine which
pattern or switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting
226
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Clear the error or
status message.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 4.
Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on
the display.
Go to step 5.
Securely connect
the cables.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Step 5
a Check the telephone wall jack.
1 Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone
cable into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone
cable into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall
jack.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Troubleshooting
227
Action
Yes
No
Step 6
Go to step 7.
Connect the printer
to an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Go to step 8.
• Try calling the fax
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the
correct digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be
connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can
be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect
the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port)
on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to
request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router
that will support analog use. For more information, contact
your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure
you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If
none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone
line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector?
Step 7
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
• If the telephone
line is being used
by another
device, then wait
until the other
device is finished
before sending a
fax.
• If you are using
the On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear
a dial tone.
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters)
between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending
or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 9.
Troubleshooting
228
Action
Yes
No
Step 9
a Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily
disabling call waiting.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 10.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 11.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 10
a Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information,
contact your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
b Try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.
b Scan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
Can send but not receive faxes
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
Troubleshooting
229
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Check the ring count delay settings.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the
Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you
want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
d Click Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
Can receive but not send faxes
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the printer control panel, press Fax to put the printer in
fax mode, and then resend the fax job.
Can you send faxes?
Troubleshooting
230
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
a Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the
ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items,
transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items
on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is
loaded properly.
b Resend the fax job.
Can you send faxes?
Step 3
The problem is
a Check if the shortcut number is configured for the number that solved.
you want to dial.
Contact customer
support.
Note: As an alternative, you can dial the telephone number
manually.
b Resend the fax job.
Can you send faxes?
Received fax has poor print quality
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
a Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
b Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
c Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the
quality of the telephone line connection.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Troubleshooting
231
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the
Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the Web page correctly.
b Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
c In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 14400
• 33600
d Click Submit.
e Resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the
cartridge, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
Solving scanner problems
•
•
•
•
•
•
“The scanner does not respond” on page 232
“Scan job was not successful” on page 233
“Scanner unit does not close” on page 233
“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 233
“Poor scanned image quality” on page 234
“Partial document or photo scans” on page 235
Troubleshooting
232
The scanner does not respond
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Turn on the printer.
Go to step 3.
Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Go to step 4.
Connect the power
cord to the printer
and a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and
the computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Turn on the switch or Go to step 5.
reset the breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 7.
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment
and then go to step
6.
Step 7
The problem is
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn solved.
the printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
Go to step 6.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting
233
Scan job was not successful
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
Connect the cables
properly.
Change the file
name.
Go to step 3.
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to
the computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Close the file you are Go to step 4.
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another scanning.
application or being used by another user.
Step 3
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Contact customer
support.
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing
file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Step 4
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box
selected in the destination configuration settings?
Select the Append
time stamp or
Overwrite existing
file check box in the
destination
configuration
settings.
Scanner unit does not close
Action
Yes
No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
a Lift the scanner unit.
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
b Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
c Lower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Troubleshooting
234
Action
Yes
No
Step 2
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Increase the scan
resolution settings
for a higher‑quality
output.
Go to step 4.
See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 154.
Go to step 5.
Place the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Go to step 6.
See “Print quality
problems” on
page 203.
Go to step 7.
Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Poor scanned image quality
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free
cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
• From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
• From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
• When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and
Content Source settings are correct for the document being
scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Troubleshooting
235
Action
Yes
No
Step 7
Problem solved.
Contact customer
support.
Yes
No
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Partial document or photo scans
Action
Contact customer
Check the placement of the document or photo.
support.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the
scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Load the document
or photo facedown
on the scanner glass
in the upper left
corner.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action
Yes
No
Step 1
a Turn on the printer.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Step 2
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
a View the printer IP address:
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page,
and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address.
Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to
type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer IP
address to access the Embedded Web Server.
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Troubleshooting
236
Action
Yes
No
Step 3
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
The problem is
Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are solved.
secure.
a Connect the cables properly. For more information, see the
setup documentation that came with the printer.
b Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
Go to step 5.
Check if the network is working.
a Print a network setup page.
b Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm
that the status is Connected.
Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection
may be intermittent, or the network cable may be defective.
Contact your system support person for a solution, and then
print another network setup page.
c Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
d Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Step 4
c Press Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
The problem is
solved.
Contact your system
support person.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
Contacting customer support
Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:
• Printer problem
• Error message
• Printer model type and serial number
Go to http://support.lexmark.com to receive e‑mail or chat support, or browse through the library of manuals,
support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.
Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries
or regions, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Notices
237
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX310dn, MX317dn
Machine type:
7015
Model(s):
270
Edition notice
June 2017
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the
products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to
make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be
used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2017 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software
Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only
those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices
238
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation
software CD.
Trademarks
Lexmark, the Lexmark logo, MarkNet, AccuRead, and MarkVision are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Lexmark International, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies
in the United States and other countries.
Mopria®, the Mopria® logo, and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s
designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer
is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used
in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus
The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery
Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial
The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times
Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a
product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago
Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile
Nebiolo
Geneva
Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans
The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman
International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa
International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery
International Typeface Corporation
Joanna
The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices
239
Marigold
Arthur Baker
Monaco
Apple Computer, Inc.
New York
Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford
Arthur Baker
Palatino
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy
Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman
The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
•
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Notices
240
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing
One-sided: 53; Two-sided: 52
Scanning
55
Copying
54
Ready
N/A
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature
15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature
-40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity
1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your
local sales office phone number.
Notices
241
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in
concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in
Schedule II of the Rules.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local
authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch the areas near these symbols without first touching
a metal surface in an area away from the symbol.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped
by Lexmark.
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser
that is nominally a 12‑milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655–675 nanometers. The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Notices
242
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην
ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射,请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode
Description
Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing
The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.
One-sided: 520; Twosided: 340
Copy
The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.
540
Scan
The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.
20
Ready
The product is waiting for a print job.
11
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.
3.2
Hibernate
The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode.
0.4
Off
The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is 0
turned off.
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Notices
243
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):
20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response
time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more
energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions
3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified
between one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Notices
244
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
日本の VCCI 規定
製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。
この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この
装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。
取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。
VCCI-B
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,
2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage
limits, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and EN55032 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1 or
EN 62368-1.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to your telephone company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
Notices
245
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and
modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is
also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier
that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of
this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm
equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time
it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance
transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notices
246
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the
equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to
customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide
problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which
this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified
by UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized
safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local
lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence
number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés
n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro
REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là
d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un
parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur
répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL
(Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout
endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item
of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions
for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another
item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible
with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same
line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Notices
247
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the
equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following
limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single
manual call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt
and the beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there
is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Japanese telecom notice
The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified
by JATE, with Certification Number A11-0160001.
Lexmark International, Inc.
LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which
receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog
telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être
utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark
Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen
werden. Die Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Notices
248
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee
che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti
su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher
Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with
SHA-256/382 and AES Galois Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to
Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in
the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites
for TLS implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic
Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version
1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER
PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the
country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,
from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Notices
249
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for
repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the
product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or
option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to
that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this
statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12
months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with
the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser
Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is
available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”
message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to
deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark
designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the
Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of
the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a
repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal
obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the
latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized
products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized
use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area
contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer
covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Notices
250
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of
prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL
APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover
actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or
damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL
LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the
possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's
and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers
are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not
apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Index
251
Index
Numerics
C
250‑sheet tray
installing 20
550‑sheet tray
installing 20
cables
Ethernet 23
USB 23
canceling
fax job 86
canceling a copy job from the
printer control panel 64
canceling a print job
from a computer 55
from the printer control
panel 54
canceling an e-mail 68
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 235
card stock
loading, multipurpose
feeder 35
tips 44
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 177
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load [paper
orientation] 177
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 177
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 177
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 177
checking an unresponsive
printer 191
checking status of parts and
supplies 155
checking the status of parts and
supplies 155
cleaning
exterior of the printer 153
interior of the printer 153
scanner glass 154
cleaning the printer 153
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 178
Close front door 178
A
accessing the remote control
panel
Embedded Web Server 164
Active NIC menu 104
adapter plug 78
adding hardware options
print driver 24
adding internal options
print driver 24
address book button
printer control panel 13
ADF
copying using 56
adjusting printer display
brightness 148
adjusting Sleep mode 148
adjusting toner darkness 51
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 164
AirPrint
using 52
answering machine
setting up 70
AppleTalk menu 109
arrow buttons
printer control panel 13
attaching cables 23
available internal options 16
avoiding jams 47
avoiding paper jams 167
B
back button
printer control panel 13
binding
fax options 89
blocking junk faxes 86
collate
copy options 65
collating copies 62
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 178
compressed images appear on
prints 204
confidential data
information on securing 152
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 54
confidential print jobs 53
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 178
configuration information
wireless network 25
Configure MP menu 97
configuring
supply notifications, imaging
unit 165
supply notifications,
maintenance kit 165
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 165
configuring e‑mail settings 67
configuring supply notifications
from the Embedded Web
Server 165
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 81
connecting to a wireless network
using PBC, Push Button
Configuration method 27
using PIN, Personal
Identification Number
method 27
using the Embedded Web
Server 28
using wireless setup wizard 26
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 148
Eco‑Mode 146
Hibernate mode 148
Quiet mode 147
Schedule Power Modes 149
Sleep mode 148
conserving supplies 146
Index
contacting customer
support 236
control panel
indicator light 14
Sleep button light 14
controller board
accessing 16
copies
copy options 64
copy from
copy options 64
copy job
canceling 64
copy options
collate 65
copies 64
copy from 64
copy to 65
darkness 65
overlay 66
paper saver 66
scale 65
separator sheets 66
copy quality
adjusting 61
copy screen
content source 66
content type 65, 88
Copy Settings menu 116
copy to
copy options 65
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 222
partial document or photo
copies 224
poor copy quality 222
poor scanned image
quality 234
scanner unit does not
close 222, 233
copying
adding an overlay message 63
adjusting quality 61
canceling a copy job from the
printer control panel 64
collating copies 62
enlarging 60
making a copy lighter or
darker 60
multiple pages on one sheet 63
on letterhead 58
on transparencies 57
252
photos 57
placing separator sheets
between copies 62
quick copy 56
reducing 60
selecting a tray 59
to a different size 59
using the ADF 56
using the scanner glass 57
creating a fax destination
shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 84
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 90
custom paper type
assigning 40
custom paper type name
creating 40
Custom Scan Sizes menu 102
Custom Type [x]
assigning a paper type 40
Custom Type [x] name
creating 40
Custom Types menu 101
customer support
contacting 236
D
darkness
copy options 65
fax options 88
date and time, fax
setting 82
daylight savings time, faxing 82
Default Source menu 94
Defective flash detected [51] 179
digital subscriber line (DSL)
fax setup 74
digital telephone service
fax setup 77
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 193
display, printer control panel
adjusting brightness 148
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 81
documents, printing
from a computer 51
from a mobile device 52
DSL filter 74
E
Eco‑Mode
using 146
Embedded Web Server
accessing the remote control
panel 164
adjusting brightness 148
administrator settings 164
checking the status of parts 155
checking the status of
supplies 155
creating a fax destination
shortcut 84
creating an FTP shortcut 90
creating e‑mail shortcuts 68
initial fax setup 70
modifying confidential print
settings 54
networking settings 164
problem accessing 235
setting up e‑mail alerts 164
Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide
where to find 164
Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator’s Guide
where to find 152
emission
notices 239, 240, 243, 244
enlarging a copy 60
envelopes
loading, multipurpose
feeder 35
tips on using 42
environmental settings
Eco‑Mode 146
Hibernate mode 148
printer display brightness,
adjusting 148
Quiet mode 147
Schedule Power Modes 149
Sleep mode 148
erasing non‑volatile memory 151
erasing volatile memory 151
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 179
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 179
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 25
Index
Ethernet port 23
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 25
EXT port 23
e‑mail
canceling 68
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 164
paper jam 164
setting up 164
e‑mail function
setting up 67
E‑mail Settings menu 127
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 68
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 68
e‑mailing
configuring e‑mail settings 67
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 68
setting up e‑mail function 67
using a shortcut number 68
F
factory defaults, restoring 166
fax
options 88
fax button
printer control panel 13
fax function
setting up 225
fax function is not set up 225
fax log
viewing 86
Fax memory full 179
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 120
fax options
binding 89
darkness 88
orientation 89
resolution 88
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 179
fax screen
content source 88
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 179
253
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 78
digital telephone service 77
DSL connection 74
standard telephone line
connection 70
VoIP 76
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 179
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 180
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 225
can receive but not send
faxes 229
can send but not receive
faxes 228
cannot send or receive a
fax 226
received fax has poor print
quality 230
fax, sending
using shortcuts 84
using the printer control
panel 83
faxing
blocking junk faxes 86
canceling a fax job 86
changing resolution 85
configuring the printer to
observe daylight saving
time 82
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 84
fax setup 70
forwarding faxes 87
holding faxes 87
making a fax lighter or
darker 85
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 84
setting the date and time 82
setting the fax number or
station number 82
setting the outgoing fax name
or station name 82
viewing a fax log 86
FCC notices 239, 244
finding more information about
the printer 9
Finishing menu 135
font sample list
printing 54
forwarding faxes 87
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut 91
FTP Settings menu 130
G
General Settings menu 112
Google Cloud Print
using 52
green settings
Eco‑Mode 146
Hibernate mode 148
Quiet mode 147
Schedule Power Modes 149
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 24
held jobs 53
printing from a Macintosh
computer 53
printing from Windows 53
held print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 53
printing from Windows 53
Help menu 145
Hibernate mode
using 148
holding faxes 87
home button
printer control panel 13
HTML menu 143
I
identifying jam locations 168
Image menu 144
imaging unit
ordering 157
replacing 160
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 180
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 180
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 180
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 180
Index
indicator light
printer control panel 13
initial fax setup 70
using the Embedded Web
Server 70
installing an optional card 18
installing options
order of installation 19
installing the 250‑sheet tray 20
installing the 550‑sheet tray 20
installing the printer software 24
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 181
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 181
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 180
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 181
internal options, adding
print driver 24
IPv6 menu 107
J
jams
avoiding 167
jams, clearing
in automatic document
feeder 176
multipurpose feeder 174
standard bin 172
trays 174
K
keypad
printer control panel 13
L
labels, paper
tips on using 43
letterhead
copying on 58
loading, multipurpose
feeder 35
tips on using 42
Lexmark Mobile Print
using 52
line filter 74
LINE port 23
linking trays 39
254
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 182
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 182
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 183
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 183
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom string] [orientation] 181
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name]
[orientation] 181
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] orientation] 182
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size]
[orientation] 182
loading
multipurpose feeder 35
trays 30
loading the optional tray 30
loading the standard tray 30
M
maintenance kit
ordering 157
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 183
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 183
Maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 183
memory
types installed on printer 151
Memory full [38] 184
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 184
menu settings page
printing 28
menus
Active NIC 104
AppleTalk 109
Configure MP 97
Copy Settings 116
Custom Scan Sizes 102
Custom Types 101
Default Source 94
E‑mail Settings 127
Fax Mode (Analog Fax
Setup) 120
Finishing 135
FTP Settings 130
General Settings 112
Help 145
HTML 143
Image 144
IPv6 107
list of 93
Network [x] 104
Network Card 106
Network Reports 105
Paper Loading 100
Paper Size/Type 94
Paper Texture 97
Paper Weight 99
PCL Emul 139
PDF 138
PostScript 139
PPDS 141
Quality 136
Reports 103
Security Audit Log 110
Set Date and Time 111
Setup 134
SMTP Setup menu 109
Standard Network 104
Substitute Size 97
TCP/IP 106
Universal Setup 102
Utilities 138
Wireless 108
XPS 138
menus list 93
mobile device
printing from 51, 52
Mopria Print Service
using 51
moving the printer 10, 162
multiple pages on one sheet 63
multipurpose feeder
loading 35
N
Network [x] menu 104
Network [x] software error
[54] 184
Network Card menu 106
Network Reports menu 105
network settings
Embedded Web Server 164
network setup page
printing 29
Index
Networking Guide
where to find 164
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 184
noise emission levels 240
noise, printer
reducing 147
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 184
non‑volatile memory 151
erasing 151
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 185
notices 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,
244, 246, 247
number of remaining pages
estimate 155
O
optional card
installing 18
optional tray
loading 30
options
250‑sheet tray, installing 20
550‑sheet tray, installing 20
fax 88
memory cards 16
ordering
imaging unit 157
maintenance kit 157
ordering supplies
toner cartridges 156
orientation
fax options 89
overlay
copy options 66
overlay message, adding
copying 63
P
paper
characteristics 44
letterhead 45
loading, multipurpose
feeder 35
preprinted forms 45
recycled 46
selecting 45
setting size 30
setting type 30
255
storing 47
unacceptable 46
Universal size setting 30
using recycled 146
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 196
paper jam in front door 169
paper jam in the automatic
document feeder 176
paper jam in the duplex unit 173
paper jam in the multipurpose
feeder 174
paper jam in the rear door 171
paper jam in the standard
bin 172
paper jam in trays 174
paper jam, clearing
in automatic document
feeder 176
in front door 169
in the duplex unit 173
in the rear door 171
multipurpose feeder 174
standard bin 172
trays 174
paper jams
avoiding 167
paper labels
loading, multipurpose
feeder 35
Paper Loading menu 100
paper saver
copy options 66
Paper Size/Type menu 94
paper sizes
supported 48
Paper Texture menu 97
paper types
supported by printer 50
where to load 50
Paper Weight menu 99
paper weights
supported by printer 50
parts
checking status 155
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 155
using genuine Lexmark 156
parts and supplies, status of
checking, on printer control
panel 155
PCL Emul menu 139
PDF menu 138
Personal Identification Number
method
using 27
phone splitter 76
photos
copying 57
placing separator sheets
between copies 62
PostScript menu 139
PPDS font error [50] 185
PPDS menu 141
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 25
print driver
hardware options, adding 24
print irregularities 208
print job
canceling from the printer
control panel 54
canceling, from computer 55
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 154
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 212
characters have jagged
edges 203
clipped pages or images 203
compressed images appear on
prints 204
gray background on prints 205
horizontal voids appear on
prints 206
print irregularities 208
print is too dark 210
print is too light 211
printer is printing solid black
pages 213
repeating print defects appear
on prints 214
shadow images appear on
prints 215
skewed print 215
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 216
streaked vertical lines 217
toner fog or background
shading 219
toner rubs off 219
toner specks appear on
prints 220
Index
transparency print quality is
poor 220
uneven print density 220
white streaks 220
print troubleshooting
incorrect characters print 197
incorrect margins on prints 207
jammed pages are not
reprinted 195
job prints from wrong tray 197
job prints on wrong paper 197
jobs do not print 199
Large jobs do not collate 198
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 198
paper curl 208
paper frequently jams 195
print job takes longer than
expected 200
tray linking does not work 201
unexpected page breaks
occur 202
printer
basic model 11
fully configured 11
minimum clearances 10
moving 10, 162
selecting a location 10
shipping 163
printer configurations 11
printer control panel
adjusting brightness 148
factory defaults, restoring 166
using 13
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 185
printer information
where to find 9
printer is printing blank
pages 212
printer messages
Cartridge, imaging unit
mismatch [41.xy] 177
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load [paper
orientation] 177
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 177
Change [paper source] to
[paper size] load
[orientation] 177
256
Change [paper source] to
[paper type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 177
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 178
Close front door 178
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 178
Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored
[57] 178
Defective flash detected
[51] 179
Error reading USB drive.
Remove USB. 179
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 179
Fax memory full 179
Fax partition inoperative.
Contact system
administrator. 179
Fax server 'To Format' not set
up. Contact system
administrator. 179
Fax Station Name not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 179
Fax Station Number not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 180
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 180
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 180
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 180
Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] [34] 180
Insufficient memory to collate
job [37] 181
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 181
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 180
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 181
Load [paper source] with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 182
Load [paper source] with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 182
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 183
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 183
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name]
[orientation] 181
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] [orientation] 182
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size]
[orientation] 182
Load multipurpose feeder with
custom string] [orientation] 181
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 183
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 183
Maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 183
Memory full [38] 184
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 184
Network [x] software error
[54] 184
No analog phone line
connected to modem, fax is
disabled. 184
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 184
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 185
PPDS font error [50] 185
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 185
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive cartridge
[31.xy] 185
Remove paper from standard
output bin 186
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 186
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 186
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 186
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 187
Index
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 187
Replace maintenance kit
[80.xy] 187
Replace missing fuser
[31.xyz] 187
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 187
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 187
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 188
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 188
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 188
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if
problem persists. [840.02] 189
Scanner jam, remove all
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 189
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 189
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 189, 191
Some held jobs were not
restored 189
Standard network software
error [54] 189
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 190
Supply needed to complete
job 190
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 190
Too many flash options installed
[58] 190
Too many trays attached
[58] 190
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 191
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 179
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 193
tray problems 194
257
printer problems, solving
basic 191
printer security
information on 152
printer software, installing 24
printing
font sample list 54
from a computer 51
from a mobile device 51, 52
menu settings page 28
network setup page 29
printing a network setup
page 29
printing held jobs
from a Macintosh computer 53
from Windows 53
printing slows down 201
publications
where to find 9
Push Button Configuration
method
using 27
Q
Quality menu 136
Quiet mode 147
R
recycled paper
using 46, 146
recycling
Lexmark packaging 149
Lexmark products 149
toner cartridges 150
reducing a copy 60
reducing noise 147
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 185
remote control panel
using Embedded Web
Server 164
Remove paper from standard
output bin 186
repeat print jobs 53
repeating print defects appear on
prints 214
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 186
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 186
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 186
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 187
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 187
Replace maintenance kit
[80.xy] 187
Replace missing fuser
[31.xyz] 187
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 187
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 187
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 188
replacing
imaging unit 160
toner cartridge 158
reports
viewing 165
Reports menu 103
reserve print jobs 53
printing from Windows 53
reset button
printer control panel 13
resolution
fax options 88
resolution, fax
changing 85
RJ11 adapter 78
S
safety information 6, 7, 8
scale
copy options 65
scan troubleshooting
partial document or photo
scans 235
scan job was not
successful 233
scanner unit does not
close 222, 233
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 233
scanner
Automatic document feeder
(ADF) 13
functions 12
scanner glass 13
Index
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 188
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 188
Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. [840.02] 189
scanner glass
cleaning 154
copying using 57
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 189
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 189
scanning
quick copy 56
to a computer 91
scanning to a computer 91
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 90
using a shortcut 91
Schedule Power Modes
using 149
security
modifying confidential print
settings 54
Security Audit Log menu 110
security slot 23
security Web page
where to find 152
select button
printer control panel 13
selecting a location for the
printer 10
selecting paper 45
sending a fax using the
computer 83
sending fax
using shortcuts 84
using the printer control
panel 83
sending fax at a scheduled
time 84
separator pad
ordering 157
separator sheets
copy options 66
Set Date and Time menu 111
setting
paper size 30
258
paper type 30
TCP/IP address 106
setting the fax number or station
number 82
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 82
setting the Universal paper
size 30
setting up e‑mail alerts 164
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 78
digital telephone service 77
DSL connection 74
standard telephone line
connection 70
VoIP connection 76
setting up fax function 225
Setup menu 134
shipping the printer 163
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 68
fax destination 84
FTP destination 90
sleep button
printer control panel 13
Sleep mode
adjusting 148
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 189, 191
SMTP Setup menu 109
Some held jobs were not
restored 189
Standard Network menu 104
Standard network software error
[54] 189
standard tray
loading 30
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 190
start button
printer control panel 13
statement of volatility 151
status of parts and supplies
checking 155
stop or cancel button
printer control panel 13
storing
paper 47
supplies 158
storing print jobs 53
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 216
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 217
streaks appear 220
Substitute Size menu 97
supplies
checking status 155
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 155
conserving 146
storing 158
using genuine Lexmark 156
using recycled paper 146
supplies, ordering
imaging unit 157
maintenance kit 157
separator pad 157
toner cartridges 156
Supply needed to complete
job 190
supply notifications
configuring 165
supported paper sizes 48
T
TCP/IP menu 106
telecommunication
notices 244, 246, 247
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 190
the scanner does not
respond 232
tips
card stock 44
letterhead 42
on using envelopes 42
on using labels 43
transparencies 42
tips on using envelopes 42
toner cartridge
replacing 158
toner cartridges
ordering 156
recycling 150
toner darkness
adjusting 51
Too many flash options installed
[58] 190
Too many trays attached [58] 190
transparencies
copying on 57
Index
loading, multipurpose
feeder 35
tips 42
trays
linking 39
loading 30
unlinking 39
troubleshooting
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 235
checking an unresponsive
printer 191
fax function is not set up 225
solving basic printer
problems 191
the scanner does not
respond 232
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 222
partial document or photo
copies 224
poor copy quality 222
poor scanned image
quality 234
scanner unit does not
close 222, 233
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 193
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 225
can receive but not send
faxes 229
can send but not receive
faxes 228
cannot send or receive a
fax 226
received fax has poor print
quality 230
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 196
troubleshooting, print
incorrect characters print 197
incorrect margins on prints 207
jammed pages are not
reprinted 195
job prints from wrong tray 197
job prints on wrong paper 197
jobs do not print 199
Large jobs do not collate 198
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 198
259
paper curl 208
paper frequently jams 195
print job takes longer than
expected 200
tray linking does not work 201
unexpected page breaks
occur 202
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 212
characters have jagged
edges 203
clipped pages or images 203
compressed images appear on
prints 204
gray background on prints 205
horizontal voids appear on
prints 206
print irregularities 208
print is too dark 210
print is too light 211
printer is printing solid black
pages 213
repeating print defects appear
on prints 214
shadow images appear on
prints 215
skewed print 215
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 216
streaked vertical lines 217
toner fog or background
shading 219
toner rubs off 219
toner specks appear on
prints 220
transparency print quality is
poor 220
uneven print density 220
white streaks on a page 220
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 193
tray problems 194
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 201
troubleshooting, scan
partial document or photo
scans 235
scan job was not
successful 233
scanner unit does not
close 222, 233
scanning takes too long or
freezes the computer 233
U
uneven print density 220
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 191
Universal paper size
setting 30
Universal Setup menu 102
unlinking trays 39
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 179
USB port 23
using Hibernate mode 148
using recycled paper 146
using Schedule Power
Modes 149
using shortcuts
sending fax 84
Utilities menu 138
V
verify print jobs 53
vertical voids appear 220
viewing
reports 165
viewing a fax log 86
voice mail
setting up 70
voice over Internet Protocol
(VoIP)
fax setup 76
voids appear 220
VoIP adapter 76
volatile memory 151
erasing 151
volatility
statement of 151
W
Wireless menu 108
wireless network
configuration information 25
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 28
wireless setup wizard
using 26
Index
X
XPS menu 138
260
Download PDF
Similar pages